Keyboard Part Number List
3428 keyboards found/on record (showing page 6/14 - results 1251 to 1500)...
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392602 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3151 Model 310 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 360 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 410 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 460 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language The original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
IT ISO (ASCII-style) |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Comes with specific ASCII character sublegends on the numeric keypad keycaps |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3151 ASCII Display Station Brief Description, Charges, and Availability (#187-132) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Application Platform Version 1.00, IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Application Toolkit Version 1.00 o 5604-268 (Item No. 08F0558) IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZP88-0455) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392603 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3151 Model 310 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 360 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 410 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 460 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
ES ISO (ASCII-style) |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Comes with specific ASCII character sublegends on the numeric keypad keycaps |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3151 ASCII Display Station Brief Description, Charges, and Availability (#187-132) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Application Platform Version 1.00, IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Application Toolkit Version 1.00 o 5604-268 (Item No. 08F0558) IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZP88-0455) [source: IBM] Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=159ae6ae35cded03 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392604 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3151 Model 310 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 360 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 410 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 460 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norwegian ISO (ASCII-style) |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Comes with specific ASCII character sublegends on the numeric keypad keycaps |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3151 ASCII Display Station Brief Description, Charges, and Availability (#187-132) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Application Platform Version 1.00, IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Application Toolkit Version 1.00 o 5604-268 (Item No. 08F0558) IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZP88-0455) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392605 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3151 Model 310 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 360 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 410 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 460 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
DK ISO (ASCII-style) |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Comes with specific ASCII character sublegends on the numeric keypad keycaps |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3151 ASCII Display Station Brief Description, Charges, and Availability (#187-132) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Application Platform Version 1.00, IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Application Toolkit Version 1.00 o 5604-268 (Item No. 08F0558) IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZP88-0455) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392606 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3151 Model 310 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 360 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 410 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 460 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swedish ISO (ASCII-style) |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Comes with specific ASCII character sublegends on the numeric keypad keycaps |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3151 ASCII Display Station Brief Description, Charges, and Availability (#187-132) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Application Platform Version 1.00, IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Application Toolkit Version 1.00 o 5604-268 (Item No. 08F0558) IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZP88-0455) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392607 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3151 Model 310 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 360 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 410 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 460 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss-French ISO (ASCII-style) |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Comes with specific ASCII character sublegends on the numeric keypad keycaps |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3151 ASCII Display Station Brief Description, Charges, and Availability (#187-132) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Application Platform Version 1.00, IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Application Toolkit Version 1.00 o 5604-268 (Item No. 08F0558) IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZP88-0455) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392608 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3151 Model 310 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 360 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 410 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 460 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss-German ISO (ASCII-style) |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Comes with specific ASCII character sublegends on the numeric keypad keycaps |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3151 ASCII Display Station Brief Description, Charges, and Availability (#187-132) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Application Platform Version 1.00, IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Application Toolkit Version 1.00 o 5604-268 (Item No. 08F0558) IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZP88-0455) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392609 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3151 Model 310 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 360 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 410 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 460 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
PT ISO (ASCII-style) |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Comes with specific ASCII character sublegends on the numeric keypad keycaps |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3151 ASCII Display Station Brief Description, Charges, and Availability (#187-132) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Application Platform Version 1.00, IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Application Toolkit Version 1.00 o 5604-268 (Item No. 08F0558) IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZP88-0455) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392610 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3151 Model 310 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 360 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 410 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 460 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
BE ISO (ASCII-style) |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Comes with specific ASCII character sublegends on the numeric keypad keycaps |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3151 ASCII Display Station Brief Description, Charges, and Availability (#187-132) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Application Platform Version 1.00, IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Application Toolkit Version 1.00 o 5604-268 (Item No. 08F0558) IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZP88-0455) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392620 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3151 Model 310 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 360 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 410 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 460 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Latin American Spanish ISO (ASCII-style) |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Comes with specific ASCII character sublegends on the numeric keypad keycaps |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3151 ASCII Display Station Brief Description, Charges, and Availability (#187-132) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Application Platform Version 1.00, IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Application Toolkit Version 1.00 o 5604-268 (Item No. 08F0558) IBM Personal System/2 RPG II Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZP88-0455) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1391401 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1386085 |
| Known Package/Box Part NumbersKnown Package/Box Part Numbers Possible numbers assigned to the original packaging this keyboard was shipped in. |
1393990 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
1401 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S., Lexmark, IBM Mexico |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Possible FRU part numbers include 1392090 for late IBM-made examples and 1393990 for Lexmark-made examples that were specifically sold for the IBM 4694 POS System |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1993-EIN-101 Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Model 60 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG87-4005) [source: IBM] Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1987-ibm-model-m-1391401-made-by-ibm-14-may-87/ Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1993-ibm-model-m-1391401-made-by-ibm-13-jan-93/ Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1993-ibm-model-m-1391401-manufactured-for-ibm-by-lexmark-21-dec-93/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1391402 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1386715 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
1402 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French AZERTY ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Model 60 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG87-4005) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1391403 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1386716, 8134179 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
1403 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge, IBM logo across lock-light LEDs overlay |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 or Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1990-EEP-102 Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Model 60 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG87-4005) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1391404 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1386717 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
1404 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Model 60 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG87-4005) [source: IBM] Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20220719222510/https://www.ebay.de/itm/354159658905 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1391405 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
1405 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Model 60 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG87-4005) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1391406 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1386719 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
1406 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge, IBM logo across lock-light LEDs overlay |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 or Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1987-EEP-102 Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Model 60 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG87-4005) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1391407 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1387526 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
1407 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge, IBM logo across lock-light LEDs overlay |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Danish ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Model 60 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG87-4005) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1391408 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
1408 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Hebrew ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Model 60 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG87-4005) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1391409 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1387528 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
1409 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norwegian ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Model 60 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG87-4005) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1391410 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
1410 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portuguese ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Model 60 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG87-4005) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1391411 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
1411 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swedish/Finnish ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Model 60 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG87-4005) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1391412 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1387531 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
1412 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss-French/Swiss-German ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Model 60 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG87-4005) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1391413 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1387594 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S., IBM Mexico |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian French ISO |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1391414 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1389520 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
1414 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K., IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgian AZERTY ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Model 60 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG87-4005) [source: IBM] Web: https://imgur.com/gallery/6PTeMp1 Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1992-ibm-model-m-1391414-01-10-92-102-key-belgian-azerty-new/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1391490 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
1490 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Arabic ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Model 60 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG87-4005) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1391511 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
1511 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Dutch ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Model 60 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG87-4005) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1393395 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
3395 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Enhanced Keyboard for the Personal Computer Announcement Letter (#ZG87-4014) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395881 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
0245 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss-French ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Enhanced Keyboard for the Personal Computer Announcement Letter (#ZG87-4014) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395882 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
0246 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss-German ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Enhanced Keyboard for the Personal Computer Announcement Letter (#ZG87-4014) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396790 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1396791 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6790 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K., Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 or Grey coiled-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Intended for EMEA use only |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S52G-9971-02) [source: Ardent Tool] Doc: IBM Enhanced Keyboard for the Personal Computer Announcement Letter (#ZG87-4014) [source: IBM] Web: https://www.worthpoint.com/worthopedia/ibm-model-clicky-keyboard-1396790-262681792 Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1994-ibm-model-m-1396790-made-by-ibm-uk-1994-12-07/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392980 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Terminal Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3151 Model 110 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 160 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI (ASCII-style) |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$104 USD in 1987 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3151 ASCII Display Station Brief Description, Charges, and Availability (#187-132) [source: IBM] Web: https://www.reddit.com/r/modelm/comments/yu0e9i/ibm_ssk_model_1392980_for_the_ibm_3151_terminal/ Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=67089.0 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
76X0100 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
3323 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
4680 POS Matrix Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Key Tronic |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Key Tronic capacitive foam and foil (tactile variant) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1987 Q4 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1995-12-26 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
ABS with double-shot legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
139 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size matrix |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Relegendable w/ dedicated numeric keypad |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$560 USD in 1987 |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Believed to be the only IBM keyboard with Key Tronic foam and foil switches |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-X198x-KB-139 Doc: IBM 4683 Point of Sale Terminal Models, Displays, and Enhancements Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#187-240) [source: IBM] Doc: Withdrawal From Marketing: All Models of the 4683 POS Terminal and Selected Model Conversions and Features for the 4683 and 4684 POS Terminals (#A95-1128) [source: IBM] Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/articles/76X0100_explore |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392540 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M-based Typewriter Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1988 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
78 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20220404223335/https://www.ebay.co.uk/itm/175222346112 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1393773 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M-based Typewriter Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1988 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
65 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.computertradeexchange.com/inventory/IBMG.html |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1393844 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M-based Typewriter Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1988 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
72 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portuguese ISO |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1393705 |
| RPQRPQ Request Price Quotation The number used to indicate that this keyboard was a special order or modified from the factory but doesn't count as an entirely new product. |
8J0088 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3151 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1988 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Has combined F1/F13 to F12/F24 function key row |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3206 Display Station Withdrawal Announcement (#194-012) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394012 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3151 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1988 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI (ASCII-style) |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Comes with specific ASCII character sublegends on the numeric keypad keycaps, has been spotted with unique combined 1/13/25 to 12/24/36 function key row, it's presently unknown if this part number was 3151 model specific |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://deskthority.net/viewtopic.php?f=62&t=16706&start= Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20230715180843/https://www.ebay.com/itm/134638708463?orig_cvip=true&nordt=true&rt=nc Web: https://www.tamayatech.com/parts.php?g=1394012 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1389172 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1389173 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type I 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battleship |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1988 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Dual-setting riser feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed DIN (240) cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
"FPxx" command key block |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=4cca8d3193de263f |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1393656 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type I 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battleship |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1988 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Dual-setting riser feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Considered to be the "old version" of P/N 1397000 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Tivoli System Automation for Integrated Operations Management User's Guide (#SC23-6113-01) [source: usermanual.wiki] Web: https://deskthority.net/viewtopic.php?p=486864#p486864 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1390713 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type II 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battleship |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1988 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed DIN (240) cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
"PFxx" command key block, only known to be found with potentially-aftermarket Polish typewriter layout keycaps |
| CreditsCredits A reserved special acknowledgement to anyone who has helped me with research through social media, email or via the P/N submission form for this keyboard part number. |
Submitted by r/ModelM Discord community member razerban |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1390867 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1390903 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type II 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battleship |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1988 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed DIN (240) cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Nordic(?) ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
"Cmdxx" command key block, exact host system currently unknown but likely IBM 319x series [Twinax] Display Station |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=7246c08e20567b4f |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1393691 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1988 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Features numerous unique legends and sublegends for airline reservation software usage |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.worthpoint.com/worthopedia/vintage-ibm-model-1393691-keyboard-3850544777 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1393915 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M PS/2 50-Key Function Keypad |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M50 |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1988 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
49 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
50% matrix |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Functional Keypad |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Features an arrow key cluster in the middle key column bank and a numeric keypad with capitalised enter key in the right key column bank |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392450 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1392449 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type II 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battleship |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1988 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed DIN (240) cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Comes with a single "PFxx" command key row |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1989-ibm-model-m-122-key-keyboard-1392450-31-jul-89/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1393669 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1393670 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1988 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 or Grey coiled-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Slovenia/Croatia/Bosnia ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Known to be an option for the IBM PC Server 330 series, was known to be made with non-modular PS/2 cables from late 1995 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1393387 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1393388 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
2549 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Screen Reader Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1988 Q1 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1995-04-28 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Flip-out wire foot |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM PS/2 mouse emulation |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
18 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$600 USD in 1988 |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Possible FRUs include 1393515 for the keypad and 72X8537 for its SDL cable (although this requires more confirmation) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1989-SR2-18 Doc: Withdrawal: IBM Screen Reader Keypad and Cable -- Replacement Available (#195-112) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM Customer Announcement Summary - January 26, 1988 (#C88-001) [source: IBM] Web: https://techmonitor.ai/technology/ibm_announces_ps2_screen_reader_keypad |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1393780 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M-based Typewriter Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
70 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Believed to be an IBM Wheelwriter 6 Series II keyboard assembly |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20220616195630/https://www.ebay.co.uk/itm/185104415747 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395240 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Industrial Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Allen-Bradley black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Manufactured for Allen-Bradley |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1989-ibm-model-m-1395240-industrial-gray-new-07-dec-89/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395158 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1395157 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S., IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Has combined F1/F13 to F12/F24 function key row, 3270-style "PAx" keys and "User1" and "User3" keys |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.worthpoint.com/worthopedia/vintage-ibm-model-keyboard-terminal-3823020638 Web: https://imgur.com/a/igCMVbg |
| CreditsCredits A reserved special acknowledgement to anyone who has helped me with research through social media, email or via the P/N submission form for this keyboard part number. |
CoolPenguin1#5714 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1390728 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type II 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battleship |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed DIN (240) cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
"PFxx" command key block, exact host system currently unknown but likely IBM 319x series [Coax] Display Station |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20220719220821/https://www.ebay.co.uk/itm/284900179787 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1390877 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type II 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battleship |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed DIN (240) cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
(Canadian?) French QWERTY ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
"Fxx" command key block |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1390891 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1390907 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type II 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battleship |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed DIN (240) cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
"Mdtxx" command key block |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1391506 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
1392015 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM Mexico, IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Latin American Spanish ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S52G-9971-02) [source: Ardent Tool] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394064 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Comes with stock trading orientated keycaps, some of which have double-stroke borders above and below the legends |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://deskthority.net/viewtopic.php?t=17598 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395217 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
1395253 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S., Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Features various green front-facing sublegends on the left side of the keyboard for stock brokerage or financial service usage, a single Ctrl key with blue legends, an enter key in place of the right Ctrl key and a back-tab legend on the backlash key |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://ide-research.net/keyboard/keyboard-review/ibm-space-saver/1395217-2/ Web: https://www.reddit.com/r/MechanicalKeyboards/comments/1ggjcbb/what_do_you_fellas_think_of_my_model_m_ssk/#lightbox |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394100 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3471 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 3270 family) IBM 3472 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 3270 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:IBM_1394100_keyboard.jpg |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394114 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1394140 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3471 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 3270 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
DE ISO |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394308 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20240121213951/https://www.ebay.co.uk/itm/185942900619 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394324 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1394350 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
English (United Kingdom) ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1989-BT3-122 Web: https://www.ibm.com/support/knowledgecenter/de/ssw_ibm_i_71/nls/rbagssbcskybrddispprtnumb.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
08L1196 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6094-020 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Lighted Program Function Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Alps Electric |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven Black/Stealth Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
32 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$375 USD in 1989 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www-01.ibm.com/common/ssi/ShowDoc.wss?docURL=/common/ssi/rep_ca/6/897/ENUS189-166/index.html&request_locale=en |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
37F8226 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6094-020 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Lighted Program Function Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Alps Electric |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
32 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$375 USD in 1989 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www-01.ibm.com/common/ssi/ShowDoc.wss?docURL=/common/ssi/rep_ca/6/897/ENUS189-166/index.html&request_locale=en |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394946 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
1394972 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6382 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Industrial Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 7541 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7541 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7542 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7562 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 040) IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 150) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S., Lexmark, Unicomp |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7562 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0141) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7542 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0142) [source: IBM] Doc: GEARBOX Model 800 Industrial Computer Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0248) [source: IBM] Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20221112190820/https://www.ebay.com/itm/155242840625?orig_cvip=true |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394953 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6378 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Industrial Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 7541 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7541 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7542 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7562 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 040) IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 150) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgium ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7562 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0141) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7542 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0142) [source: IBM] Doc: GEARBOX Model 800 Industrial Computer Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0248) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394955 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6380 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Industrial Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 7541 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7541 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7542 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7562 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 040) IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 150) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Danish ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7562 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0141) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7542 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0142) [source: IBM] Doc: GEARBOX Model 800 Industrial Computer Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0248) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394956 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6383 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Industrial Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 7541 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7541 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7542 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7562 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 040) IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 150) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
FR ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7562 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0141) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7542 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0142) [source: IBM] Doc: GEARBOX Model 800 Industrial Computer Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0248) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394958 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1386716 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6384 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Industrial Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 7541 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7541 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7542 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7562 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 040) IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 150) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
DE ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1990-EIN-102 Doc: IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7562 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0141) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7542 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0142) [source: IBM] Doc: GEARBOX Model 800 Industrial Computer Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0248) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394959 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6386 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Industrial Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 7541 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7541 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7542 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7562 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 040) IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 150) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
IT ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7562 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0141) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7542 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0142) [source: IBM] Doc: GEARBOX Model 800 Industrial Computer Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0248) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394962 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6388 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Industrial Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 7541 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7541 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7542 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7562 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 040) IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 150) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Dutch |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7562 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0141) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7542 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0142) [source: IBM] Doc: GEARBOX Model 800 Industrial Computer Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0248) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394963 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6389 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Industrial Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 7541 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7541 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7542 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7562 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 040) IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 150) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
NO ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7562 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0141) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7542 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0142) [source: IBM] Doc: GEARBOX Model 800 Industrial Computer Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0248) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394964 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6390 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Industrial Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 7541 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7541 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7542 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7562 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 040) IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 150) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
PT ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7562 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0141) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7542 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0142) [source: IBM] Doc: GEARBOX Model 800 Industrial Computer Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0248) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394965 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6391 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Industrial Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 7541 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7541 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7542 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7562 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 040) IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 150) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
ES ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7562 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0141) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7542 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0142) [source: IBM] Doc: GEARBOX Model 800 Industrial Computer Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0248) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394966 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6392 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Industrial Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 7541 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7541 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7542 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7562 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 040) IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 150) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swedish/Finnish ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7562 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0141) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7542 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0142) [source: IBM] Doc: GEARBOX Model 800 Industrial Computer Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0248) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394967 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6393 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Industrial Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 7541 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7541 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7542 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7562 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 040) IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 150) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss-German/French ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7562 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0141) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7542 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0142) [source: IBM] Doc: GEARBOX Model 800 Industrial Computer Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0248) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394968 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6381 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Industrial Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 7541 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7541 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7542 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7562 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 040) IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 150) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7562 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0141) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7542 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0142) [source: IBM] Doc: GEARBOX Model 800 Industrial Computer Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0248) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394970 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6385 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Industrial Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 7541 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7541 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7542 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM 7561 Model 111 Industrial Computer IBM 7562 Model 011 Industrial Computer IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 040) IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 150) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Hebrew |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7562 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0141) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7542 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0142) [source: IBM] Doc: GEARBOX Model 800 Industrial Computer Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0248) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394193 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1394203 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
English (United States/Canada) MNCS |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1999-ETM-102 Doc: IBM InfoWindow II 3486/3488/3489 Marketing Reference Guide (#G326-0265-10) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20220515154814/https://www.ebay.com/itm/275312238266 Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394204 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
1394802 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1394230 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
9131 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3471 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 3270 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge, IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$295 USD in 1989 |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Combined F1/F13 to F12/F24 function key row, comes with three-way cable router, silver square models are typically converted from other part numbers by C.E.L. Technical Services |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1995-ETM-102 Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3471 Display Station Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#189-096) [source: IBM] Web: https://imgur.com/gallery/XKBaXWl Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=d7d166d367732f2e |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394416 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Austrian/German |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3477 User's Guide (#GA18-2923-00) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394417 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3477 User's Guide (#GA18-2923-00) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394418 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Danish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3477 User's Guide (#GA18-2923-00) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394419 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Finnish/Swedish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3477 User's Guide (#GA18-2923-00) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394420 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French (Azerty) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3477 User's Guide (#GA18-2923-00) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394421 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3477 User's Guide (#GA18-2923-00) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394422 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norwegian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3477 User's Guide (#GA18-2923-00) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394423 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1394449 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portuguese/Brazilian Portuguese |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3477 User's Guide (#GA18-2923-00) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/de/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394424 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3477 User's Guide (#GA18-2923-00) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394425 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French (Switzerland) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3477 User's Guide (#GA18-2923-00) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394426 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German (Switzerland) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3477 User's Guide (#GA18-2923-00) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394427 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1394453 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Dutch (Netherlands) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3477 User's Guide (#GA18-2923-00) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394428 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
English (United Kingdom) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3477 User's Guide (#GA18-2923-00) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394429 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Greek (Code Page 00423) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3477 User's Guide (#GA18-2923-00) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394432 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Latin 2 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3477 User's Guide (#GA18-2923-00) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394433 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Cyrillic |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3477 User's Guide (#GA18-2923-00) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394434 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Icelandic |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3477 User's Guide (#GA18-2923-00) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394435 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Hebrew |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3477 User's Guide (#GA18-2923-00) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394436 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Arabic |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3477 User's Guide (#GA18-2923-00) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395162 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3151 Model 510 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 560 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 610 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) IBM 3151 Model 660 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S., Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI (PC-style) |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Some known to come with Northern Health Systems branding |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/58f6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395567 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian French |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3477 User's Guide (#GA18-2923-00) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395665 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
1395666 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S., Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
English (United States/Canada) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3477 User's Guide (#GA18-2923-00) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20220719222256/https://www.ebay.com/itm/134177052145 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395668 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish speaking |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3477 User's Guide (#GA18-2923-00) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395669 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
104 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Japanese Katakana |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3477 User's Guide (#GA18-2923-00) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395670 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Thai |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3477 User's Guide (#GA18-2923-00) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396768 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Greek (Code Page 00875) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3477 User's Guide (#GA18-2923-00) [source: bitsavers] Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
09F4230 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
9104 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model 1B 104-key Quiet Touch Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Domesaver |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3471 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 3270 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Honeywell/Micro Switch |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Micro Switch ST rubber domes with sliders |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Dual-setting riser feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
104 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Unsaver |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ISO |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$295 USD in 1989 |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
"Fxx" command key block |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3471 Display Station Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#189-096) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
09F4231 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
9156 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model 1B 104-key Quiet Touch Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Domesaver |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3471 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 3270 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Honeywell/Micro Switch |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Micro Switch ST rubber domes with sliders |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Dual-setting riser feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
104 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Unsaver |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Data Entry ISO |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$295 USD in 1989 |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
"PFxx" command key block |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-X1990-QTS-104 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394332 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Arabic |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394801 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
9122 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ISO |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$295 USD in 1989 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM InfoWindow 3471 Display Station Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#189-096) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394971 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6377 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Industrial Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 040) IBM GEARBOX Model 800 (Feature 150) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
AR ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7561 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7562 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0141) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 011, IBM 7541 Industrial Computer Model 111 & IBM 7542 Industrial Computer Model 011 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0142) [source: IBM] Doc: GEARBOX Model 800 Industrial Computer Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#ZG89-0248) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
25F6329 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
4680 ANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
SMK |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
SMK discrete rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
ABS with double-shot legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
116 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Alphanumeric Point-of-Sale Keyboard for the IBM 4684 Point-of-Sale Terminal Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#189-195) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM Store Systems Part Catalog (#S131-0097-09) [source: Infania Networks] Web: archive/view?id=a2014492c36ad991 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
25F6350 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
3324 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
4680 ANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
SMK |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
SMK discrete rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1989 Q4 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1995-12-26 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
ABS with double-shot legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
115 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$595 USD in 1989 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Alphanumeric Point-of-Sale Keyboard for the IBM 4684 Point-of-Sale Terminal Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#189-195) [source: IBM] Doc: Withdrawal From Marketing: All Models of the 4683 POS Terminal and Selected Model Conversions and Features for the 4683 and 4684 POS Terminals (#A95-1128) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM Store Systems Part Catalog (#S131-0097-09) [source: Infania Networks] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1393934 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M-based Typewriter Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM Netherlands |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
67 |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Possibly for an IBM Personal Wheewriter but presently unconfirmed |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20220710120014/https://www.ebay.com/itm/374005298298 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396454 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1396453 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3151 Model 862 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Has combined F1/F13 to F12/F24 function key row and numerous diacritics keys to support American Library Association (ALA) character entry |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/58f6.htm Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=4b57110e7b4dba6f |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
35G4745 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Hungarian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=90970.msg2471918#msg2471918 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395622 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Russian/Cyrillic |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S52G-9971-02) [source: Ardent Tool] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395674 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1395673 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S., IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Likely for 3270-family terminal emulation software due the presence of a "PA1" legend on the numpad 1 key |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=99603.0 Web: https://www.worthpoint.com/worthopedia/vintage-ibm-model-1991-keyboard-n-1955487051 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392554 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M PS/2 50-Key Function Keypad |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M50 |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
Transparent ABS |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
50 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
50% matrix |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Relegendable |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395249 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1392554 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M PS/2 50-Key Function Keypad |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M50 |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S., Lexmark, Unicomp |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
50 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
50% matrix |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Alphanumeric |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M2000-TEL-50 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394104 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1394130 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3471 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 3270 family) IBM 3472 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 3270 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://deskthority.net/viewtopic.php?t=359 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394317 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1394343 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.ibm.com/support/knowledgecenter/de/ssw_ibm_i_71/nls/rbagssbcskybrddispprtnumb.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394320 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1394346 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.ibm.com/support/knowledgecenter/de/ssw_ibm_i_71/nls/rbagssbcskybrddispprtnumb.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394327 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1394353 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Croatian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.ibm.com/support/knowledgecenter/de/ssw_ibm_i_71/nls/rbagssbcskybrddispprtnumb.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394328 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1394354 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Latin 2 (Polish 214) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20240122162619/https://archiwum.allegro.pl/oferta/ibm-model-m-122-rok-1990-sprawna-i11207155422.html Web: https://www.reddit.com/r/modelm/comments/gyunum/my_new_battlecruiser/ Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20240122163630/https://public.dhe.ibm.com/systems/power/docs/systemi/v5r2/fr_FR/rbagsmst.pdf |
| CreditsCredits A reserved special acknowledgement to anyone who has helped me with research through social media, email or via the P/N submission form for this keyboard part number. |
u/hax0rz_ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394331 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1394357 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Hebrew |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.ibm.com/support/knowledgecenter/de/ssw_ibm_i_71/nls/rbagssbcskybrddispprtnumb.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395660 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S., Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ISO |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397000 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
1397050 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1396401 |
| Known Package/Box Part NumbersKnown Package/Box Part Numbers Possible numbers assigned to the original packaging this keyboard was shipped in. |
1396400 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S., Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20220719220120/https://www.ebay.com/itm/255637595814 Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395682 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Industrial Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Made for Mopar, features blue F1, F2 and navigation cluster keycaps |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1990-ibm-model-m-industrial-space-saving-1395682-10-31-90/ Web: https://deskthority.net/viewtopic.php?t=16586 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395691 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Industrial Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Known to have some blue keycaps, likely equivalent to P/N 1395682 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.ardent-tool.com/docs/pdf/IBM_7785_Hardware_Maintenance_Reference_Service.pdf Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=59817.0 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395300 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S., Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1993-2PS-101 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395706 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K., Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1993-2PS-102 ASK: SNKB-M1993-2PS-102-A ASK: SNKB-M1995-2PS-102 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395707 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German QWERTZ ISO |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395708 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French AZERTY ISO |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395712 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian ISO |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395713 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swedish/Finnish ISO |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395715 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portuguese ISO |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395720 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish ISO |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
6247440 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
E57888 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Misc. Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Brother Industries |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
straightened-style detachable proprietary mini-DIN to AMP cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Has dye-sublimated keycaps, typically does not come with the required cable included in the box |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://deskthority.net/wiki/IBM_6247440_for_RT_and_5086_Processor |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
79F1028 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Lighted Program Function Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Alps Electric |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Alps SKCL "Yellow" w/ Green LED |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
ABS with LED windows |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed DE-9 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
32 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Functional keypad |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-L1991-MCM-32 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394540 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1394553 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6010 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S., IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$255 in 1990 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: The IBM Xstation 120 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#190-027) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM 7009 Compact Server Service Guide (#SA23-2716-01) [source: kev009] Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1992-ibm-model-m-1394540-made-by-ibm-uk-1992-09-21-with-speaker/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394541 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French Canadian ISO |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7009 Compact Server Service Guide (#SA23-2716-01) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM 7006 Graphics Workstation Service Guide (#SA23-2719-01) [source: Ardent Tool] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394542 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German ISO |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7009 Compact Server Service Guide (#SA23-2716-01) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM 7006 Graphics Workstation Service Guide (#SA23-2719-01) [source: Ardent Tool] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394543 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgian-French/Dutch |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7009 Compact Server Service Guide (#SA23-2716-01) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM 7006 Graphics Workstation Service Guide (#SA23-2719-01) [source: Ardent Tool] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394544 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Danish ISO |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7009 Compact Server Service Guide (#SA23-2716-01) [source: kev009] Doc: IBM 7006 Graphics Workstation Service Guide (#SA23-2719-01) [source: Ardent Tool] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394545 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Finnish/Swedish ISO |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7009 Compact Server Service Guide (#SA23-2716-01) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394546 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French AZERTY ISO |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7009 Compact Server Service Guide (#SA23-2716-01) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394547 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian ISO |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7009 Compact Server Service Guide (#SA23-2716-01) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394548 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norwegian ISO |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7009 Compact Server Service Guide (#SA23-2716-01) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394549 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portuguese ISO |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7009 Compact Server Service Guide (#SA23-2716-01) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394550 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish ISO |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7009 Compact Server Service Guide (#SA23-2716-01) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394551 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss German/French ISO |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7009 Compact Server Service Guide (#SA23-2716-01) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395968 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Icelandic ISO |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7009 Compact Server Service Guide (#SA23-2716-01) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395984 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
CSA166 |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7009 Compact Server Service Guide (#SA23-2716-01) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395985 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7009 Compact Server Service Guide (#SA23-2716-01) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396077 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Turkish ANSI |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7009 Compact Server Service Guide (#SA23-2716-01) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396078 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Greek ANSI |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7009 Compact Server Service Guide (#SA23-2716-01) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396079 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Arabic ISO |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7009 Compact Server Service Guide (#SA23-2716-01) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396080 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Hebrew |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7009 Compact Server Service Guide (#SA23-2716-01) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396056 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3151 Model 805 ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1990 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI (5250-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/58f6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1391526 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgian-French ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Several examples of a military-spec version modified by Thomson-CSF with military green casing, EM dampening on the circuitry and cable and no IBM logo have been encountered |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1393285 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Greek ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S52G-9971-02) [source: Ardent Tool] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397651 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Old Dell rectangle, New Dell rectangle |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1993-EEP-101-B Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1991-dell-model-m-old-logo-1397651-07-19-91/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397721 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
1397725 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
WANG oval |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1991-wang-laboratories-model-m-1397721-09-12-91/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
09F4320 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model 1B 104-key Quiet Touch Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Domesaver |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3472 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 3270 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Honeywell/Micro Switch |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Micro Switch ST rubber domes with sliders |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Dual-setting riser feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
104 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Unsaver |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
"Fxx" command key block |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=14f8d4f9f45016ed |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397681 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
1397685 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1397682 |
| Known Package/Box Part NumbersKnown Package/Box Part Numbers Possible numbers assigned to the original packaging this keyboard was shipped in. |
1397680 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S., Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available as an option for the IBM Select-A-Keyboard scheme as the US English keyboard with fixed keytops |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PS/2 Model 25 SX Hardware Maintenance Manual pamphlet (#S10G-6610-00) [source: ManualsLib] Web: https://ide-research.net/keyboard/keyboard-review/ibm-space-saver/1397681-2/ Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20230429170304/https://www.ebay.com/itm/134527387590?orig_cvip=true&nordt=true&rt=nc |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392560 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
1392559 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1392554 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M PS/2 50-Key Function Keypad |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
M50 |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
Transparent ABS |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
50 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
50% matrix |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Relegendable |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394119 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1394145 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3471 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 3270 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Yugoslavian/Croatian/Bosnian/Slovenian ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://deskthority.net/viewtopic.php?p=498911#p498911 |
| CreditsCredits A reserved special acknowledgement to anyone who has helped me with research through social media, email or via the P/N submission form for this keyboard part number. |
Jugostran#2852 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394312 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1394338 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Austrian/German ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=85220.0 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396900 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian French ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396901 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
LA Spanish ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397501 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgium ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397506 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397507 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397511 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss French ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397512 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss German ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397513 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397515 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Cyrillic ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396130 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3-based Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396902 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Austrian German ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396903 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgium ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396904 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Danish ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396905 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Dutch ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396906 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Sweden/Finland ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396908 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396909 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norway ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396910 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portugal ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396911 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spain ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396912 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss/French ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396913 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss/German ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396914 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396916 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Cyrillic ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396917 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Greece ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396919 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Iceland ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396921 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Turkey ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396990 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397003 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1396924 |
| Known Package/Box Part NumbersKnown Package/Box Part Numbers Possible numbers assigned to the original packaging this keyboard was shipped in. |
1397500 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1997-BT4-122 Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397024 |
| Known Package/Box Part NumbersKnown Package/Box Part Numbers Possible numbers assigned to the original packaging this keyboard was shipped in. |
1397025 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1999-11-09 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
For use in Europe, Middle East and Africa only |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: WDFM of Options by IBM: Selected PSG Products Announcement Letter (#ZG99-0600) [source: IBM] Web: https://geekhack.org/index.php?topic=5264.msg77530#msg77530 Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=5bc927a8cce8d899 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396181 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3-based Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Laptop L40SX - Parts Listing (#PFAN-3QX835) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396810 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3-based Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian French |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Laptop L40SX - Parts Listing (#PFAN-3QX835) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396811 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3-based Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish Speaking |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Laptop L40SX - Parts Listing (#PFAN-3QX835) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396812 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3-based Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Laptop L40SX - Parts Listing (#PFAN-3QX835) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396813 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3-based Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Danish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Laptop L40SX - Parts Listing (#PFAN-3QX835) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396814 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3-based Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Laptop L40SX - Parts Listing (#PFAN-3QX835) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396815 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3-based Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Laptop L40SX - Parts Listing (#PFAN-3QX835) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396816 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3-based Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Laptop L40SX - Parts Listing (#PFAN-3QX835) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396817 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3-based Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Dutch |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Laptop L40SX - Parts Listing (#PFAN-3QX835) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396818 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3-based Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norwegian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Laptop L40SX - Parts Listing (#PFAN-3QX835) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396819 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3-based Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portuguese |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Laptop L40SX - Parts Listing (#PFAN-3QX835) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396820 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3-based Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Laptop L40SX - Parts Listing (#PFAN-3QX835) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396821 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3-based Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swedish/Finnish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Laptop L40SX - Parts Listing (#PFAN-3QX835) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396822 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3-based Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss/French |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Laptop L40SX - Parts Listing (#PFAN-3QX835) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396823 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3-based Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss/German |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Laptop L40SX - Parts Listing (#PFAN-3QX835) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396824 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3-based Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Laptop L40SX - Parts Listing (#PFAN-3QX835) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396825 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3-based Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Arabic |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Laptop L40SX - Parts Listing (#PFAN-3QX835) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396826 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3-based Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Greek |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Laptop L40SX - Parts Listing (#PFAN-3QX835) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396827 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3-based Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Hebrew |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Laptop L40SX - Parts Listing (#PFAN-3QX835) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396828 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3-based Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Icelandic |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Laptop L40SX - Parts Listing (#PFAN-3QX835) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396829 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3-based Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Turkish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Laptop L40SX - Parts Listing (#PFAN-3QX835) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396199 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6119 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3 Numeric Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Detachable modular-8P8C ("RJ-45") to PS/2-like combined keypad/mouse 6-pin mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
17 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Sports a pass-through PS/2 connector for PC-compatible mice, applicable for use in Belgium, Portugal, the UK and Israel |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: The IBM PS/2 Model L40 SX system (8543-A44) and Features (#ZG91-0105) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396571 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
0247 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3 Numeric Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Detachable modular-8P8C ("RJ-45") to PS/2-like combined keypad/mouse 6-pin mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
17 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French AZERTY |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Sports a pass-through PS/2 connector for PC-compatible mice |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: The IBM PS/2 Model L40 SX system (8543-A44) and Features (#ZG91-0105) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396572 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
1397189 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
0248 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3 Numeric Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
PS/2-like combined keypad/mouse 6-pin mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
17 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Sports a pass-through PS/2 connector for PC-compatible mice |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1992-3KP-17 Doc: The IBM PS/2 Model L40 SX system (8543-A44) and Features (#ZG91-0105) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396573 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
0249 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3 Numeric Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Detachable modular-8P8C ("RJ-45") to PS/2-like combined keypad/mouse 6-pin mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
17 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Sports a pass-through PS/2 connector for PC-compatible mice |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: The IBM PS/2 Model L40 SX system (8543-A44) and Features (#ZG91-0105) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396574 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
0250 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3 Numeric Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Detachable modular-8P8C ("RJ-45") to PS/2-like combined keypad/mouse 6-pin mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
17 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Sports a pass-through PS/2 connector for PC-compatible mice |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: The IBM PS/2 Model L40 SX system (8543-A44) and Features (#ZG91-0105) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396575 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
0251 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3 Numeric Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Detachable modular-8P8C ("RJ-45") to PS/2-like combined keypad/mouse 6-pin mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
17 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Sweden/Finland |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Sports a pass-through PS/2 connector for PC-compatible mice |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: The IBM PS/2 Model L40 SX system (8543-A44) and Features (#ZG91-0105) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396576 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6576 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3 Numeric Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Detachable modular-8P8C ("RJ-45") to PS/2-like combined keypad/mouse 6-pin mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
17 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Arabic |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Sports a pass-through PS/2 connector for PC-compatible mice |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: The IBM PS/2 Model L40 SX system (8543-A44) and Features (#ZG91-0105) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396577 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6577 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3 Numeric Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Detachable modular-8P8C ("RJ-45") to PS/2-like combined keypad/mouse 6-pin mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
17 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Greece |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Sports a pass-through PS/2 connector for PC-compatible mice, applicable for use in Greece, Denmark, Netherlands, Norway, Iceland and Turkey |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: The IBM PS/2 Model L40 SX system (8543-A44) and Features (#ZG91-0105) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396578 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6578 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3 Numeric Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Detachable modular-8P8C ("RJ-45") to PS/2-like combined keypad/mouse 6-pin mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
17 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss/German |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Sports a pass-through PS/2 connector for PC-compatible mice |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: The IBM PS/2 Model L40 SX system (8543-A44) and Features (#ZG91-0105) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396579 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6579 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M3 Numeric Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Detachable modular-8P8C ("RJ-45") to PS/2-like combined keypad/mouse 6-pin mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
17 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss/French |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Sports a pass-through PS/2 connector for PC-compatible mice |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: The IBM PS/2 Model L40 SX system (8543-A44) and Features (#ZG91-0105) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397451 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
1397470 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4 Space Saver Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1996-4KB-83 Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=50c1a8b96fc4d74b |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1398051 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
1398053 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4 Space Saver Numeric Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Detachable modular-10P10C ("RJ-50") to modular-10P10C ("RJ-50") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
17 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=7cccbd395b752665 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
79F0167 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
5576-A01 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
5576-series Full-Size Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Brother Industries |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Brother modular buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1991 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey rounded rectangle |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin slim SDL-like to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
106 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Japanese JIS |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-X1993-A01-106 Doc: IBM Data Interpretation System Version 1 Release 3 (#ZP91-0481) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
35G4742 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Russian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.ibm.com/docs/en/i/7.1?topic=information-sbcs-keyboard-display-part-numbers-by-language Web: https://festima.ru/docs/261158410/kaluga/klaviatura-ibm-35g4742-1995-03-01-7675s |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1393286 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Turkish 440 ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was also known to be used with the IBM RISC System/6000 7043 43P series |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S52G-9971-02) [source: Ardent Tool] |
This part number is currently disputed. This could be due to several distinct and unrelated keyboards sharing the same part number. Click here to learn why this part number is disputed.
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397134 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
1397136 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Includes secondary legends and modifier colour coding for use with Corel WordPerfect |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397599 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
1392090 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1386085 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S., Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Seems to exist only as a FRU for 1391401, its ID number always ends in "C" |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.worthpoint.com/worthopedia/ibm-1397599-keyboard-used-asis-16-92-1791624324 Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1992-ibm-model-m-1397599-made-by-ibm-03-09-92/ Web: https://www.worthpoint.com/worthopedia/ibm-clicky-pn-1397599-buckling-spring-1893112511 Web: https://www.worthpoint.com/worthopedia/vintage-ibm-lexmark-keyboard-1397599-1986422752 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397735 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Various examples with missing badges have been found |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1992-EEP-101 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1398601 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1386085 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Lexmark logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1994-lexmark-model-m-lexmark-brand-1398601-09-mar-94/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1398609 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to DIN (180) cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Seems to be a Lexmark OEM keyboard with a blank rectangle logo cavity |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.recycledgoods.com/ibm-1398609-at-keyboard/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1399046 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1399047 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 or Grey straightened-style fixed 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Greek ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.reddit.com/r/modelm/comments/zekey2/tax_agency_in_my_work_building_was_moving_saved/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1399246 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
FileNet oval |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
PT ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Pfk2fTs4tjs |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1399579 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1399585 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Russian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20220414160927/https://www.olx.ua/d/obyavlenie/klaviatura-ibm-model-m-IDObV2o.html |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
51G8572 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S., Lexmark, IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7006 Graphics Workstation Service Guide (#SA23-2719-01) [source: Ardent Tool] Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20220927094350/https://www.ebay.com/itm/204102090056/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397961 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Lexmark logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 2) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://deskthority.net/viewtopic.php?t=22078 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394103 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3472 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 3270 family) IBM 3483 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 3270 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S., IBM U.K. |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
2000-09-30 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
124 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Japanese Katakana |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20230303140927/https://www.ibm.com/common/ssi/ShowDoc.wss?docURL=/common/ssi/rep_ca/7/760/MON00027/index.html Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=4094778444206b88 Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=b79e58f476de2e72 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395661 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ISO |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395662 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian French ISO |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395663 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish ISO |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395664 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3476 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3477 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3486 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3487 InfoWindow II Display Station (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3488 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station Model V (IBM 5250 family) IBM 3489 InfoWindow II Modular Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Japanese (Katakana) ISO |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396767 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M/Model 1A Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Greek (codepage 00875) ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
For use with IBM 3476, 3477, 3486, 3487, 3488 and 3489 terminals |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
25H2163 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian French (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
25H2177 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| KeyswitchesKeyswitches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1992 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Cover ColourCover Colour The original colour of this keyboard's cover set (outer casing). For keyboards whose cover set materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo, None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM Mode 2 (scancode set 3) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Latin American Spanish (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Marketing Reference Guide (US) (#G520-9415-02) [source: bitsavers] Web: http://bitsavers.trailing-edge.com/pdf/ibm/3153/G520-9415-02_IBM_InfoWindow_II_3153_Marketing_Reference_Guide_Jul1998.pdf |